Casio | CTK-2400 | manual | Casio CTK-2400 Manual

Casio CTK-2400 Manual
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪CTK-2090‬‬
‫‪CTK-2400‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪MA1402-A Printed in China‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫»ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ«‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪CTK2400-AR-1A‬‬
‫‪19:06:48‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫‪O *3‬‬
‫‪O *3‬‬
‫‪O *3‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O 0 - 127‬‬
‫‪O *2‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O *2‬‬
‫‪O 0 - 127‬‬
‫‪O *2‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪Hold 1‬‬
‫‪Sostenuto‬‬
‫‪Soft pedal‬‬
‫‪Reverb send‬‬
‫‪RPN LSB, MSB‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪100, 101‬‬
‫‪:True #‬‬
‫‪: Song Pos‬‬
‫‪: Song Sel‬‬
‫‪: Tune‬‬
‫‪: Clock‬‬
‫‪: Commands‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪System Exclusive‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Common‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Real Time‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪Aux‬‬
‫‪Messages‬‬
‫‪: All sound off‬‬
‫‪: Reset all controller‬‬
‫‪: Local ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪: All notes OFF‬‬
‫‪: Active Sense‬‬
‫‪: Reset‬‬
‫‪Remarks‬‬
‫‪ :*1‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :*2‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،RPN ،NRPN‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪. http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪ :*3‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO‬‬
‫‪Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO‬‬
‫‪Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY‬‬
‫‪Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY‬‬
‫‪Program‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪19:06:48‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪O : Yes‬‬
‫‪X : No‬‬
‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺗ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-2 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪AR-4................................... (‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪AR-17 ...............‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪AR-17 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪AR-4.................................() FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪AR-17 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ ‪AR-5 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪AR-21 ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪AR-5............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪AR-5..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪AR-6 ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪AR-6...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪AR-6............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪AR-7...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪AR-8 ............‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪AR-8..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ‪AR-9....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪AR-9.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪AR-21 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪AR-21 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪AR-22 .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪AR-23 .................................................3‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪AR-24 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪AR-25 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪AR-27 .................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪AR-27 .............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪AR-28 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ(‪AR-10 ..................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪AR-30 ...........................‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‪AR-11 ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪AR-32 ...................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ‪AR-11 ................................. SAMPLING DEMO‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻪ ‪AR-11 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪AR-13 .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ‪AR-14 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪AR-15 ................................. (VOICE PERCUSSION‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪AR-15 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪AR-31 ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-32 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪AR-33 ..................................................... MIDI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪AR-35 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ‪AR-36 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪AR-36 .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪AR-38 ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪AR-15 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪AR-39 .................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪AR-16 ....‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ‪AR-41 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪AR-16 ....................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪AR-40 .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-42 ....................................................‬‬
‫‪MIDI Implementation Chart‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫● ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺮ￯ )ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪AR-1‬‬
‫‪19:06:49‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ »ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ« ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.CTK-2090/CTK-2400‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.CTK-2400‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪cl‬‬
‫‪ck‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪bm bnbo‬‬
‫‪bt‬‬
‫‪bs‬‬
‫‪cs‬‬
‫‪br‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪co cp cq cr‬‬
‫‪cn‬‬
‫‪dk‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫‪ct‬‬
‫‪AR-2‬‬
‫‪19:06:49‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ $‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : $‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-6‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪P‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )‪(METRONOME, $ BEAT‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻟﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(VOLUME‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-7‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-6‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )‪(TEMPO‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ )‪(REW, NORMAL/FILL-IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-18‬ﻭ‪30‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫)‪(PAUSE, SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-18‬ﻭ‪30‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ،19 ،AR-7‬ﻭ‪31‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ )‪(REPEAT, INTRO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-18‬ﻭ‪30‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )‪(FF, VAR./FILL-IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-18‬ﻭ‪30‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫)‪(PLAY/STOP, START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ،17 ،AR-11‬ﻭ‪27‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )‪(TONE, SAMPLING DEMO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-8‬ﻭ‪11‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-11‬ﻭ‪17‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫)‪(PART SELECT, ACCOMP/$ CHORDS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-20‬ﻭ‪28‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪(RHYTHM, ONE TOUCH PRESET $‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ،27 ،AR-12‬ﻭ‪31‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )‪(SONG BANK‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪[−]/[+‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪١‬‬
‫)‪(SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS 1, LISTEN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-14‬ﻭ‪23‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪٢‬‬
‫)‪(SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS 2, WATCH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-14‬ﻭ‪23‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪٣‬‬
‫)‪(SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS 3, REMEMBER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-14‬ﻭ‪24‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪٤‬‬
‫)‪(SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS 4, NEXT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-14‬ﻭ‪22‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪٥‬‬
‫)‪(SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS 5, AUTO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-14‬ﻭ‪25‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫)‪(VOICE PERCUSSION, LESSON‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-15‬ﻭ‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )‪ (SAMPLING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-11‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-28‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-8‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-4‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫‪dm‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪dp‬‬
‫‪dl‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-32‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ )‪(SUSTAIN‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-9‬‬
‫‪do‬‬
‫‪dn‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(AUDIO IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-11‬ﻭ‪35‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ )‪(PHONES/OUTPUT‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪DC 9.5V‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ،AR-6‬ﻭ‪35‬‬
‫‪AR-3‬‬
‫‪19:06:49‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫( ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Trans .‬‬
‫‪Md e r nPn o‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،004‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪.4 0 0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪(FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪.(METRONOME‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [+‬ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ( ﻭ]–[ )ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ( ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]–[ ﻭ]‪[+‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪) [+‬ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ( ﻭ]–[ )ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ 11‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 13‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ 14‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫‪ 15‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ 17‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪Trans.‬‬
‫‪AR-10‬‬
‫‪AcompVol‬‬
‫‪AR-31‬‬
‫‪Song Vol‬‬
‫‪AR-19‬‬
‫‪Tune‬‬
‫‪AR-10‬‬
‫‪Reverb‬‬
‫‪AR-9‬‬
‫‪Speak‬‬
‫‪AR-24‬‬
‫‪NoteGuid‬‬
‫‪AR-25‬‬
‫‪Scoring‬‬
‫‪AR-25‬‬
‫‪PhraseLn‬‬
‫‪AR-25‬‬
‫‪SampAuto‬‬
‫‪AR-15‬‬
‫‪SampPB‬‬
‫‪AR-16‬‬
‫‪AutoIncr‬‬
‫‪AR-16‬‬
‫‪Keybd Ch‬‬
‫‪AR-33‬‬
‫‪Navi. Ch‬‬
‫‪AR-33‬‬
‫‪Local‬‬
‫‪AR-34‬‬
‫‪AcompOut‬‬
‫‪AR-34‬‬
‫‪Jack‬‬
‫‪AR-9‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫‪AR-4‬‬
‫‪19:06:50‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ .AA‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻛﺴﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ AC‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻻﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-1‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪) AD-E95100L :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ JEITA‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪(DC 9.5V‬‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪.AC‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺳﺎﺧﻨ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﺧﺬﺭﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻧﺜﻨﺎﺀ!‬
‫■ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ!‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ DC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-5‬‬
‫‪19:06:50‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Pls wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫)‪(PHONES/OUTPUT‬‬
‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻻﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-1‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻚ ﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺣﺪ￯ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6 :‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ 30 : AC‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫■ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫)‪ ،(TONE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-6‬‬
‫‪19:06:51‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) w‬ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺎ( ﻭ‪) q‬ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻭ‪ q‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻀﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ‪ 89‬ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻛﺎ ‪.089‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺗﻮﻣﺾ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﻷﻭﻝ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ ،0‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-31‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-19‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Bea t‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ 0‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻜﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-7‬‬
‫‪19:06:51‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bmbn‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻛﺴﺘﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(TONE‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ(‬
‫‪S t .GrPno‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ 001‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪.1 0 0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (TONE) ‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (RHYTHM‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫”‪“001‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪:‬‬
‫”‪“06‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪“00” :‬‬
‫ﻧﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪SUS‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪:‬‬
‫”‪“131‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺕ ﻗﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ« ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 395‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(400‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-8‬‬
‫‪19:06:51‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺻﺪ￯ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “Reverb‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﺘﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺟﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-1‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Re v e r b‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(oFF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ‪SUSTAIN‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪“Jack‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Re v e r b‬‬
‫‪Jack‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬
‫‪Sustain‬‬
‫)‪(SUS‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺭﻏﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮ‬
‫‪Sostenuto‬‬
‫)‪(SoS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ‪Soft‬‬
‫)‪(SFt‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻌﻢ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪ Rhythm‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(rHy‬‬
‫‪AR-9‬‬
‫‪19:06:52‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺤﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +12‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪Trans .‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﺮﻭﺍ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪.CD‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪ .A4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 415.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 465.9‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ 440.0‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪“Tune‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Tune‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ”‪ “Tune‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 0.1‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪440 . 0Hz‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-10‬‬
‫‪19:06:52‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‬
‫‪bmbn bo bp‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪cq‬‬
‫‪bq br bs bt ck cl‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ )ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ‪SAMPLING DEMO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺬ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(SAMPLING DEMO‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (SAMPLING) ‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪.AUDIO IN‬‬
‫! ‪Speak‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫‪AR-11‬‬
‫‪19:06:52‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪Samp l i n g‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Samp l i n g‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 0.4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫! ‪Samp l e d‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪.401‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪.412‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪0.4‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺄﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‬
‫)‪) «(VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-15‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ )ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪ (SAMPLING‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪) 412‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ( ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫! ‪Speak‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫‪AR-12‬‬
‫‪19:06:53‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(SAMPLING‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪) 415‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ( ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪) 424‬ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ‪ 5‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪) 412‬ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (5‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .SAMPLING‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺃﺻﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ SAMPLING L‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ( ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪412‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪415‬‬
‫‪ :3‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪418‬‬
‫‪ :4‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪421‬‬
‫‪ :5‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪424‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ SAMPLING S‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ( ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-13‬‬
‫‪19:06:53‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ - ‬‬
‫)‪ (SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) 1‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪(412‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪ Loop 2 Loop 1‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ« ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺗﻬﺎ )ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ( ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪SAMPLED TONES/‬‬
‫‪EFFECTS‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪401‬‬
‫‪Original Long‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪402‬‬
‫‪Loop 1 Long‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪403‬‬
‫‪Loop 2 Long‬‬
‫‪404‬‬
‫‪Loop 3 Long‬‬
‫‪405‬‬
‫‪Pitch 1 Long‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪406‬‬
‫‪Pitch 2 Long‬‬
‫‪407‬‬
‫‪Pitch 3 Long‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪408‬‬
‫‪Tremolo Long‬‬
‫‪409‬‬
‫‪Funny 1 Long‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪410‬‬
‫‪Funny 2 Long‬‬
‫‪411‬‬
‫‪Funny 3 Long‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪412‬‬
‫‪Original Short 1‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪413‬‬
‫‪Loop 1 Short 1‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪414‬‬
‫‪Loop 2 Short 1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪415‬‬
‫‪Original Short 2‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪416‬‬
‫‪Loop 3 Short 2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﺼﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪417‬‬
‫‪Pitch 1 Short 2‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪418‬‬
‫‪Original Short 3‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪419‬‬
‫‪Pitch 2 Short 3‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪420‬‬
‫‪Pitch 3 Short 3‬‬
‫‪421‬‬
‫‪Original Short 4‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪422‬‬
‫‪Tremolo Short 4‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪423‬‬
‫‪Funny 1 Short 4‬‬
‫‪424‬‬
‫‪Original Short 5‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪425‬‬
‫‪Funny 2 Short 5‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪426‬‬
‫‪Funny 3 Short 5‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-14‬‬
‫‪19:06:53‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪(VOICE PERCUSSION‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-27‬ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-27‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﻀﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “SampAuto‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(SONG BANK‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ ،[0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻏﺠﺆﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪.(SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS 1‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [YES‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ”?‪.“Sure‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS‬‬
‫( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ )‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [YES‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]‪ [NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ”?‪.“Sure‬‬
‫‪SampAu t o‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ«‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-11‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ«‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ”‪ ،“oFF‬ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-15‬‬
‫‪19:06:54‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﻴﻨﻲ )ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪“SampPB‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪“AutoIncr‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻻﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪SAMPLED TONES/EFFECTS‬‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (5‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.SAMPLING‬‬
‫‪AR-16‬‬
‫‪19:06:54‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪bo bp‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6 7 8 9 bk bl‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻜﻮﻧﻬﺎ »ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ«‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻋﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-21‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(090‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-40‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ‪.001‬‬
‫‪Tw i n k l e‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Tw i n k l e‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﺰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-40‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،001‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪.1 0 0‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫‪AR-17‬‬
‫‪19:06:55‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-22‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-22‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻘﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫‪AR-18‬‬
‫‪19:06:55‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﺄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) w‬ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺎ( ﻭ‪) q‬ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻭ‪ q‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪ￯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “Song Vol‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Song Vo l‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫‪AR-19‬‬
‫‪19:06:55‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪(SONG BANK‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬
‫)ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-20‬‬
‫‪19:06:56‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪bo bp‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪bk bl‬‬
‫‪bq br bs bt ck cl‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻄﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ )ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪1‬‬
‫‪6 7 8‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻼ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪١‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ‪3 ،2 ،1‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ‪3 ،2 ،1‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺱ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ‪3 ،2 ،1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ ،4 ،3 ،2‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺗﻚ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ!‬
‫‪AR-21‬‬
‫‪19:06:56‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫>‪<Phrase‬‬
‫>‪<Wait‬‬
‫‪NextPhrs‬‬
‫‪From Top‬‬
‫‪Complete‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”>‪ “<Wait‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ”>‪.“<Phrase‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻗﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻮﺱ ﻳﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿ ﹰﺎ ”>‪) “<Wait‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-25‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-17‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣ ﹰﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-25‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Ph r ase‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-25‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (LESSON) ‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(SONG BANK‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LESSON‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫)‪.(LESSON‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LESSON‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫)‪ (SONG BANK‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-20‬‬
‫‪AR-22‬‬
‫‪19:06:57‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻧﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻠﻦ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ :1‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺍﻭ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫>ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪<2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ :2‬ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺷﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻠﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻠﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺘﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﻤﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫!‪Bravo‬‬
‫!‪Again‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺠﺤﺖ! ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-23‬‬
‫‪19:06:57‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ :3‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،2‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪ ،3‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫>ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪<3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Tw i n k l e‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺰﻗﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “Speak‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Speak‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫‪AR-24‬‬
‫‪19:06:58‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “NoteGuid‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-17‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.1‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،1‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪No t eGu i d‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻚ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪ ،3‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ”!‪.“Bravo‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “Scoring‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪Sco r i ng‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ‪ ، ،‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺪﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-24‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-25‬ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-25‬‬
‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ ﺗﺬﻫﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “PhraseLn‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Ph r aseLn‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫‪AR-25‬‬
‫‪19:06:58‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫■ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪2 ،1‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪*3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ ،2 ،1‬ﻭ‪3‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪*3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ‪*3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫”!‪ “Bravo‬ﺍﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-26‬‬
‫‪19:06:58‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6 7 8 9 bk bl‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻣﺘﻼﻛﻚ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺇﻳﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺬﻫﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬
‫‪Funk 8B t‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ‪-8‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻟﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(RHYTHM‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ »ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ« ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،001‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪.1 0 0‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،140‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 142‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،150‬ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-27‬‬
‫‪19:06:59‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ￯ ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻣﺘﻼﻛﻚ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻃﻠﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫»ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ« ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-31‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪FINGERED 1‬‬
‫• ‪FINGERED 2‬‬
‫• ‪FINGERED 3‬‬
‫• ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬
‫• ‪FULL RANGE CHORD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪Cho r d‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪F3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D-F#-A-C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪ D-F#-A-C‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )‪.(D7‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-28‬‬
‫‪19:06:59‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫■ ‪ ،2 ،FINGERED 1‬ﻭ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-41‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪FINGERED 1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪FINGERED 2‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺸﺒﻪ ‪ ،FINGERED 1‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ”‪ “6th‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ m7‬ﺃﻭ ‪.m75‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪FINGERED 3‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺸﺒﻪ ‪ ،FINGERED 1‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ C) C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬
‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬
‫‪ C) Cm‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬
‫‪ C) C7‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ(‬
‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬
‫‪ C) Cm7‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ(‬
‫‪C C#D Eb E F F#G Ab A Bb B C C#DEb E F‬‬
‫■ ‪CASIO CHORD‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ ،CASIO CHORD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪FULL RANGE CHORD‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-41‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪AR-29‬‬
‫‪19:07:00‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ »ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ« ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ »ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺧﺘﻼﻑ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺣﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ”‪ “fill-in‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻛﻴﺪ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺸﻮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺸﻮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫■ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫■ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫‪AR-30‬‬
‫‪19:07:00‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫■ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “AcompVol‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪A c ompVo l‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻼﺋﻤﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) w‬ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺎ( ﻭ‪) q‬ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻭ‪ q‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫)‪ (RHYTHM‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫‪AR-31‬‬
‫‪19:07:01‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.MIDI‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ SP2) Windows® XP‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ( *‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫®‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪Windows® 7‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪Windows® 8‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫‪Windows® 8.1‬‬
‫‪،10.8.X ،10.7.X ،10.6.X ،10.5.X ،10.4.11 ،10.3.9) Mac OS® X‬‬
‫‪(10.9.X‬‬
‫*‪ Windows XP :١‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ Windows XP‬ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ -32‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ -32) Windows Vista :٢‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ -32) Windows 7 :٣‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ -64 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ -32) Windows 8 :٤‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ -64 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ -32) Windows 8.1 :٥‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ -64 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻥ!‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A-B‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪A‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﺒﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-32‬‬
‫‪19:07:01‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.MIDI‬‬
‫‪ : CASIO USB-MIDI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺏ ‪،Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X ،Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ : USB‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺏ ‪Windows XP‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،MIDI‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺪ￯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.16‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-17‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪.(GM) 1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪.URL‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “Keybd Ch‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Ke y bd Ch‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺟﺰﺀ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 16‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(16‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺗﻴﻦ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪05‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ (06‬ﻛﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺣﺜﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ )‪ ،(L‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ )‪ .(R‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ )‪ (R‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺔ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “Navi. Ch‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Ch‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪‬‬
‫‪Na v i .‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )‪.(R‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﺣﺜﺔ )‪.(L‬‬
‫‪AR-33‬‬
‫‪19:07:02‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫■ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (٤‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻰ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ )ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ ،((٣‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪.(R‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﺪ ﻻﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪“Local‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Loca l‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻭ‪R‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪LR‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪(R‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫✕‬
‫✕‬
‫‪‬‬
‫✕‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫✕‬
‫✕‬
‫‪‬‬
‫✕‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫”‪ “AcompOut‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪A c ompOu t‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫)‪-10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ]–[ ﻭ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪AR-34‬‬
‫‪19:07:02‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮ￯ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫)‪(PHONES/OUTPUT‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺛﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(AUDIO IN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪AR-35‬‬
‫‪19:07:03‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺃﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-5‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-5‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻭﺛﻢ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺄ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-5‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺋﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻟﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-23‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ( ) PHONES/OUTPUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،140‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 142‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،150‬ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-31‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-19‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-5‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-31‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-19‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫‪AR-36‬‬
‫‪19:07:04‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 24) 48‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-5‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻵﺕ ﺍﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-10‬ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-10‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪ I‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺠﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”!‪ “Sampled‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.SAMPLING‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SAMPLING‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SAMPLING‬ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-15‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ SampAuto‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ VOICE PERCUSSION‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-18‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺃ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-32‬‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮ￯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪AR-37‬‬
‫‪19:07:04‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫‪CTK-2090/CTK-2400‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ 61‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺭﺝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )‪ 24‬ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪) 1‬ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪) 5‬ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ)ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ )ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ 5 :‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪1 :‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،10‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2 ،0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪255‬‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫‪) 5‬ﺇﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪LR ،R ،L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫‪150‬‬
‫‪150‬‬
‫‪ ±1‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +12‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫‪ = A4‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 415.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 465.9‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ‪ 440.0 :‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺟﺮﺱ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ GM Level 1 ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻴﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 200 :‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ 4.5 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪MAX (RMS‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ 9 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ 200 :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪DC‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺑﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢﹺ ‪AA‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪AD-E95100L‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ (AC‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 9.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ = ‪ 7.7‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ 3.4‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺳﻢ × ‪2‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 2 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 9.2 × 30.7 × 94.6‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-38‬‬
‫‪19:07:05‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،TV‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ »ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ« ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﺥ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺩﺍﺏ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ﺣﺬﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺗﺨﺎﺫﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-39‬‬
‫‪19:07:05‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
WORLD
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
EVENT
TWINKLE TWINKLE LITTLE STAR
LIGHTLY ROW
LONG LONG AGO
ON TOP OF OLD SMOKEY
SAKURA SAKURA
WHEN THE SAINTS GO MARCHING IN
AMAZING GRACE
AULD LANG SYNE
COME BIRDS
DID YOU EVER SEE A LASSIE?
MICHAEL ROW THE BOAT ASHORE
DANNY BOY
MY BONNIE
HOME SWEET HOME
AURA LEE
HOME ON THE RANGE
ALOHA OE
SANTA LUCIA
FURUSATO
GREENSLEEVES
JOSHUA FOUGHT THE BATTLE OF JERICHO
THE MUFFIN MAN
LONDON BRIDGE
UNDER THE SPREADING CHESTNUT TREE
SIPPIN’ CIDER THROUGH A STRAW
GRANDFATHER’S CLOCK
ANNIE LAURIE
BEAUTIFUL DREAMER
IF YOU’RE HAPPY AND YOU KNOW IT, CLAP YOUR
HANDS
MY DARLING CLEMENTINE
LITTLE BROWN JUG
HOUSE OF THE RISING SUN
SHE WORE A YELLOW RIBBON
YANKEE DOODLE
MY OLD KENTUCKY HOME
SZLA DZIEWECZKA
TROIKA
WALTZING MATILDA
ON THE BRIDGE OF AVIGNON
I’VE BEEN WORKING ON THE RAILROAD
OH! SUSANNA
CAMPTOWN RACES
JEANNIE WITH THE LIGHT BROWN HAIR
TURKEY IN THE STRAW
JAMAICA FAREWELL
046
047
048
049
050
SILENT NIGHT
WE WISH YOU A MERRY CHRISTMAS
JINGLE BELLS
JOY TO THE WORLD
O CHRISTMAS TREE
PIANO/CLASSICS
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB
LE CYGNE FROM “LE CARNAVAL DES ANIMAUX”
JE TE VEUX
SONATA op.13 “PATÉTIQUE” 2nd Mov.
HEIDENRÖSLEIN
AIR FROM “SUITE no.3”
SPRING FROM “THE FOUR SEASONS”
HABANERA FROM “CARMEN”
BRINDISI FROM “LA TRAVIATA”
HUNGARIAN DANCES no.5
MINUET IN G MAJOR
MUSETTE IN D MAJOR
GAVOTTE (GOSSEC)
ARABESQUE (BURGMÜLLER)
CHOPSTICKS
DECK THE HALL
ODE TO JOY
AVE MARIA (GOUNOD)
SONATINA op.36 no.1 1st Mov.
PRELUDE op.28 no.7 (CHOPIN)
RÊVERIE
GYMNOPÉDIES no.1
GOING HOME FROM “FROM THE NEW WORLD”
FÜR ELISE
TURKISH MARCH (MOZART)
SONATA op.27 no.2 “MOONLIGHT” 1st Mov.
ETUDE op.10 no.3 “CHANSON DE L’ADIEU”
THE ENTERTAINER
WEDDING MARCH FROM “MIDSUMMER NIGHT’S
DREAM”
AMERICAN PATROL
FRÖHLICHER LANDMANN
LA CHEVALERESQUE
SONATA K.545 1st Mov.
LA PRIÈRE D’UNE VIERGE
VALSE op.64 no.1 “PETIT CHIEN”
LIEBESTRÄUME no.3
JESUS BLEIBET MEINE FREUDE
CANON (PACHELBEL)
SERENADE FROM “EINE KLEINE NACHTMUSIK”
MARCH FROM “THE NUTCRACKER”
EXERCISE
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091-100
101-110
EXERCISE I
EXERCISE II
AR-40
CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd
42
2014/02/07
19:07:06
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪ Fingered 3‬ﻭ‪Full Range‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪Fingered 1‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪Fingered 2 ،Fingered 1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Cm‬‬
‫‪Fm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪A add9‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‬
‫‪Cm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Gm7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Fm7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪F7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪A7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‪Ddim‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪Bm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Gm Am‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Cdim‬‬
‫‪Caug *3‬‬
‫‪Csus4 *3‬‬
‫‪Csus2 *3‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 3‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Full Range‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،3 ،2 ،Fingered 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ Full Range‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪Cm7 *3‬‬
‫‪CM7‬‬
‫‪Cm7b5 *3‬‬
‫‪C7b5 *3‬‬
‫‪C7sus4‬‬
‫‪Cadd9‬‬
‫‪Cmadd9‬‬
‫‪CmM7‬‬
‫‪Cdim7 *3‬‬
‫‪C69 *3‬‬
‫‪C6 *1 *3‬‬
‫‪Cm6 *2 *3‬‬
‫‪ *1‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﺎ ‪.Am7‬‬
‫‪ *2‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﺎ ‪.Am75‬‬
‫‪ *3‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-41‬‬
‫‪19:07:06‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫‪19:07:09‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪(A#)/Bb‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪(G#)/Ab‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪ￯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫)‪F#/(Gb‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪(D#)/Eb‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫)‪C#/(Db‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Root‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪Chord‬‬
‫‪Type‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪dim‬‬
‫‪aug‬‬
‫‪sus4‬‬
‫‪sus2‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪m7‬‬
‫‪M7‬‬
‫‪m7b5‬‬
‫‪7b5‬‬
‫‪7sus4‬‬
‫‪add9‬‬
‫‪madd9‬‬
‫‪mM7‬‬
‫‪dim7‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪m6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪AR-42‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
Models: CTK-2090/CTK-2400
Recognized
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
1 - 16
1 - 16
Function
1
1 - 16
0 - 127
0 - 127 *1
Default
Changed
36 - 96
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
X 9nH v = 0, 8nH v =**
Basic
Channel
O 9nH v = 100
X 9nH v = 0
X
O
Mode 3
X
X
X
O
Mode 3
X
X
O (MSB only)
O
O *2
O
O
O
Default
Messages
Altered
O
X
X
O
O
X
Mode
Note ON
Note OFF
True voice
Velocity
Key’s
Ch’s
Note
Number
After
Touch
Pitch Bender
Control
Change
0, 32
1
6, 38
7
10
11
Version : 1.0
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ‬:**
Remarks
Bank select
Modulation
Data entry
Volume
Pan
Expression
19:07:10
2014/02/07
46
CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd
‫‪O *3‬‬
‫‪O *3‬‬
‫‪O *3‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O 0 - 127‬‬
‫‪O *2‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O *2‬‬
‫‪O 0 - 127‬‬
‫‪O *2‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪Hold 1‬‬
‫‪Sostenuto‬‬
‫‪Soft pedal‬‬
‫‪Reverb send‬‬
‫‪RPN LSB, MSB‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪100, 101‬‬
‫‪:True #‬‬
‫‪: Song Pos‬‬
‫‪: Song Sel‬‬
‫‪: Tune‬‬
‫‪: Clock‬‬
‫‪: Commands‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪System Exclusive‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Common‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Real Time‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪Aux‬‬
‫‪Messages‬‬
‫‪: All sound off‬‬
‫‪: Reset all controller‬‬
‫‪: Local ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪: All notes OFF‬‬
‫‪: Active Sense‬‬
‫‪: Reset‬‬
‫‪Remarks‬‬
‫‪ :*1‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :*2‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،RPN ،NRPN‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪. http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪ :*3‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO‬‬
‫‪Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO‬‬
‫‪Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY‬‬
‫‪Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY‬‬
‫‪Program‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪19:06:48‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪O : Yes‬‬
‫‪X : No‬‬
‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺗ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪CTK-2090‬‬
‫‪CTK-2400‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪MA1402-A Printed in China‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫»ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ«‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪CTK2400-AR-1A‬‬
‫‪19:06:48‬‬
‫‪2014/02/07‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪CTK2400_A5_x1a_AR.indd‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising